% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
%
-\def\texinfoversion{2002-03-26.08}
+\def\texinfoversion{2005-02-19.15}
%
-% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
-% 2000, 01, 02 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software
+% Foundation, Inc.
%
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
%
-% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
-% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
-% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
%
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
-% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
-% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
-% ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
-% and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
-%
-% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
-%
-% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
-% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
%
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
%
-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get
-% the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
-% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
\let\ptexb=\b
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
\let\ptexc=\c
\let\ptexend=\end
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
\let\ptexstar=\*
\let\ptext=\t
-% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
-\let\+ = \relax
-
-\message{Basics,}
-\chardef\other=12
-
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
% starts a new line in the output.
\newlinechar = `^^J
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+ \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+ \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
+% in some cases the escape char.
+\chardef\backChar = `\\
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dotChar = `\.
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\plusChar = `\+
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\semiChar = `\;
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
+
+\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
+\chardef\spacecat = 10
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
+
+{% for help with debugging.
+ % example usage: \expandafter\show\activebackslash
+ \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \active
+ !global!def!activebackslash{\}
+}
% Ignore a token.
%
\def\gobble#1{}
-\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
-\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
-\hyphenation{eshell}
-\hyphenation{white-space}
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+ Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+ ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+ data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+ man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+ par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+ spell-ing spell-ings
+ stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+ wide-spread wrap-around
+}
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen \bindingoffset
-\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
+% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+ % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+ \leavevmode
+ %
+ % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+ \vadjust{%
+ % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+ % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+ \vskip-\baselineskip
+ %
+ % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
+ % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+ \llap{%
+ %
+ % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+ \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+ %
+ % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+ \hskip 12pt
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
%
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
-\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
- \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
- \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
- \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
-}%
-\else
-\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
- \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
- \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
- \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
- \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
- \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+\def\loggingall{%
+ \tracingstats2
+ \tracingpages1
+ \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
+ \tracingparagraphs1
+ \tracingoutput1
+ \tracingmacros2
+ \tracingrestores1
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+ \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+ \tracingscantokens1
+ \tracingifs1
+ \tracinggroups1
+ \tracingnesting2
+ \tracingassigns1
+ \fi
+ \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
+ \errorcontextlines16
}%
-\fi
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
-%
+%
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
\shipout\vbox{%
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
- \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
+ \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
%
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
\hsize = \outerhsize
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
\fi
}% end of \shipout\vbox
- }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+ }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
\advancepageno
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
}
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
%
-\def\parsearg#1{%
- \let\next = #1%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+ \def\next{#2}%
\begingroup
\obeylines
- \futurelet\temp\parseargx
-}
-
-% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
-% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
-\def\parseargx{%
- % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
- \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
- \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
- \else
- \expandafter\parseargline
- \fi
+ \spaceisspace
+ #1%
+ \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
}
-% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
-{\obeyspaces %
- \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
-
{\obeylines %
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
- %
- % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
- % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
- \argremovec #1\c\relax %
- \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
- %
- % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
- \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+ \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
}%
}
-% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
-% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
-% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
-% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
-% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
% @end itemize @c foo
-% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
-% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
-% result to \toks0.
-%
-% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
-% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
-% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
-% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
-% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
-% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
-% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
-%
-\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
- \begingroup
- \ignoreactivespaces
- \edef\temp{#1}%
- \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
- \endgroup
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+ \def\temp{#3}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty
+ % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
+ % thus we reuse \temp.
+ \let\temp\finishparsearg
+ \else
+ \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+ \fi
+ % Put the space token in:
+ \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
}
-% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \next.
+% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
%
-\begingroup
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
+
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+% is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+%
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
+
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+ \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+ \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+ \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
\obeyspaces
- \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
-\endgroup
+ \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+ % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+ % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+ % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+ % should produce a line of output anyway.
+ %
+ \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+ % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+ % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+ % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
-%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
-%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
-\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
-\def\ENVcheck{%
-\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
-\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
+%
+% \envdef\foo{...}
+% \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
-% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
-\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+% At runtime, environments start with this:
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
-\def\beginxxx #1{%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
-{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
-\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-%
-\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
-\def\endxxx #1{%
- \removeactivespaces{#1}%
- \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
- %
- \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
- % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
- \else
- \unmatchedenderror\endthing
- \fi
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\thisenv\temp
\else
- % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
- \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+ \badenverr
\fi
}
-% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
-%
-\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
+\def\badenverr{%
\errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+ \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+ not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+}
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+ \ifx#1\empty
+ out of any environment%
+ \else
+ in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+ \fi
}
-% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
%
-\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
- \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+ \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+ \else
+ % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
+ \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+ \csname E#1\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
}
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
-% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
-% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
-\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
-\def\singlespace{%
- % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
- % environments. --karl, 6may93
- %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
- %\kern \baselineskip}%
- \setleading\singlespaceskip
-}
%% Simple single-character @ commands
\let\{=\mylbrace
\let\}=\myrbrace
\begingroup
- % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
- \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+ % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+ % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+ \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
- \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
- @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
- @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
-@endgroup
+ \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+ !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+ !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+ !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+ !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
\let\, = \c
\let\dotaccent = \.
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
\let\ubaraccent = \b
\let\udotaccent = \d
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
\def\questiondown{?`}
\def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
\def\imacro{i}
\fi\fi
}
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+ L\kern-.36em
+ {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+ \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
+ \kern-.15em
+ \TeX
+}
+
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
% @* forces a line break.
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
+
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
-\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor}
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
-\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor}
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
-\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor}
+
+% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+%
+\def\onword{on}
+\def\offword{off}
+%
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+ \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
% the text is small, which looks bad.
%
-\def\group{\begingroup
- \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+ \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
\fi
+ \startsavinginserts
%
- % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
- % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
- % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
- % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
- % above. But it's pretty close.
- \def\Egroup{%
- \egroup % End the \vtop.
- \endgroup % End the \group.
- }%
- %
- \vtop\bgroup
- % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
- % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
- % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
- % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
- % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
- % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
- \everypar = {\strut}%
- %
- % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
- % normal interline spacing.
- \offinterlineskip
- %
- % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
- % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
- % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
- % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
- % empty paragraph.
- \ifx\par\lisppar
- \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
- %
- % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
- \obeylines
- \fi
- %
+ \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
\comment
}
%
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above. But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+ % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+ % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+ \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+ \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+ \egroup % End the \vtop.
+ % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+ \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+ % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+ \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+ % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+ % group, force a page break.
+ \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+ \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+ \page
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \box\groupbox
+ \prevdepth = \dimen1
+ \checkinserts
+}
+%
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
%
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
-\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
-
% Old definition--didn't work.
-%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%\parseargdef\need{\par %
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
%}}
-\def\needx#1{%
+\parseargdef\need{%
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
% paragraph.
\par
\fi
}
-% @br forces paragraph break
+% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
\let\br = \par
-% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
-% font as three actual period characters.
-%
-\def\dots{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox to 1.5em{%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
- .\hss.\hss.%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
- }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox to 2em{%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
- .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
- }%
- \spacefactor=3000
-}
-
-
-% @page forces the start of a new page
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
%
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
\newskip\exdentamount
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
-\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
-\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
-\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+ \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
% else use TEXT for both).
-%
+%
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
\def\righttext{#2}%
}
% @include file insert text of that file as input.
-% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\include{\begingroup
- \catcode`\\=12
- \catcode`~=12
- \catcode`^=12
- \catcode`_=12
- \catcode`|=12
- \catcode`<=12
- \catcode`>=12
- \catcode`+=12
- \parsearg\includezzz}
-% Restore active chars for included file.
-\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
- % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+ \pushthisfilestack
\def\thisfile{#1}%
- \input\thisfile
-\endgroup}
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \def\temp{\input #1 }%
+ \expandafter
+ }\temp
+ \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ \catcode`~=\other
+ \catcode`^=\other
+ \catcode`_=\other
+ \catcode`|=\other
+ \catcode`<=\other
+ \catcode`>=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other
+ \catcode`-=\other
+}
-\def\thisfile{}
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+ \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+ \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+ \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
+
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+ the stack of filenames is empty.}}
-% @center line outputs that line, centered
+\def\thisfile{}
-\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
-\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
-\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-\centerline{#1}}}
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+ \ifhmode
+ \let\next\centerH
+ \else
+ \let\next\centerV
+ \fi
+ \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+}
+\def\centerH#1{%
+ {%
+ \hfil\break
+ \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \line{#1}%
+ \break
+ }%
+}
+\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
-\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
-\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
% @c is the same as @comment
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
-% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
-%
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
\def\noneword{none}
%
-\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
-\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\asisword
\else
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
-\def\doexampleindent#1{%
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\asisword
\else
\fi
}
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
+%
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\noneword
+ \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+ \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+ \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+%
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
+%
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+ \gdef\indent{%
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+ \indent
+ }%
+ \gdef\noindent{%
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+ \noindent
+ }%
+ \global\everypar = {%
+ \kern -\parindent
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+ }%
+}
+
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+ \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+ \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+ \global \everypar = {}%
+}
+
+
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
%
\def\asis#1{#1}
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
-% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
-% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
-% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
-%
-% @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
-% entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
-% @math gets a chance to work. This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
-% at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
-%
-\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
%
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
-% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
-% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
-%
-{\catcode95 = \active % 95 = _
-\gdef\mathunderscore{%
- \catcode95=\active
- \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
-}}
-%
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+ \catcode\underChar = \active
+ \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+ \catcode\underChar=\active
+ \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+ }
+}
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
% otherwise define @\.
-%
+%
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
%
\def\math{%
\tex
- \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
+ \mathunderscore
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
- \implicitmath\finishmath}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
+ \mathactive
+ $\finishmath
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+ \catcode`^ = \active
+ \catcode`< = \active
+ \catcode`> = \active
+ \catcode`+ = \active
+ \gdef\mathactive{%
+ \let^ = \ptexhat
+ \let< = \ptexless
+ \let> = \ptexgtr
+ \let+ = \ptexplus
+ }
+}
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
-\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
-\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+\def\minus{$-$}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to 1.5em{%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
+ .\hfil.\hfil.%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
+ }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+ \dots
+ \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
+% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
+% Texinfo's parsing.
+%
+\let\comma = ,
% @refill is a no-op.
\let\refill=\relax
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
\def\setfilename{%
+ \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
\iflinks
- \readauxfile
+ \tryauxfile
+ % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+ \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
\openindices
- \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
- \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+ \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
%
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
- % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
- \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
- \closein1
- \temp
+ \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+ \closein 1
%
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
}
\newif\ifpdf
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
+% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
- \pdffalse
- \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
- \let\pdfurl = \gobble
- \let\endlink = \relax
- \let\linkcolor = \relax
- \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
\else
- \pdftrue
- \pdfoutput = 1
- \input pdfcolor
- \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
- \def\imagewidth{#2}%
- \def\imageheight{#3}%
- % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
- % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
- \immediate\pdfimage
+ \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+ \else
+ \ifcase\pdfoutput
\else
- \immediate\pdfximage
+ \pdftrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, to
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
+% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
+% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
+% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
+% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's we do).
+
+% double active backslashes.
+%
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
+ @gdef@activebackslash{@catcode`@\=@active @otherbackslash}
+ @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
+ @catcode@backChar=@active
+ @let\=@doublebackslash}
+}
+
+% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
+% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
+% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens. I've
+% tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
+%
+% #1 is the tokens to replace.
+% #2 is the replacement.
+% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
+%
+\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
+ \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
+ ##1%
+ \ifx\\##2\\%
+ \else
+ #2%
+ \HyReturnAfterFi{%
+ \HyPsdReplace##2\END
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
+}
+\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
+\def\backslashparens#1{%
+ \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
+ % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
+ \HyPsdSubst{(}{\backslashlparen}{#1}%
+ \HyPsdSubst{)}{\backslashrparen}{#1}%
+}
+
+{\catcode\exclamChar = 0 \catcode\backChar = \other
+ !gdef!backslashlparen{\(}%
+ !gdef!backslashrparen{\)}%
+}
+
+\ifpdf
+ \input pdfcolor
+ \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+ \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+ \def\imagewidth{#2}%
+ \def\imageheight{#3}%
+ % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+ % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+ \immediate\pdfimage
+ \else
+ \immediate\pdfximage
\fi
\ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
\ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
- #1.pdf%
+ #1.pdf%
\else
{#1.pdf}%
\fi
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
\fi}
- \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
- \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+ \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+ % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+ % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+ \atdummies
+ \turnoffactive
+ \activebackslashdouble
+ \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfdestname
+ \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
+ }}%
+ %
+ % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+ \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
+ %
\let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
\def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
- \advance\tempnum by1
+ \advance\tempnum by 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
- \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
- \openin 1 \jobname.toc
- \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
- \closein 1
- \indexnofonts
- \def\tt{}
- \let\_ = \normalunderscore
- % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
+ %
+ % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+ % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+ % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
+ % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+ % #4 is the page number
+ %
+ \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+ % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+ % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
+ % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+ % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+ \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+ \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
+ \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
+ \else
+ % Doubled backslashes in the name.
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
+ %
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
+ }
+ %
+ \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+ \begingroup
+ % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
%
- \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
- \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
- \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
- \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
- \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
- \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
- \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
- \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
- \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
- \input \jobname.toc
- \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
- \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
- \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
- \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
- \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
- \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
- \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
- \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
- \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
+ % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+ \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \def\thischapnum{##2}%
+ \def\thissecnum{0}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+ }%
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+ \def\thissecnum{##2}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+ }%
+ \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+ }%
+ \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+ }%
+ \def\thischapnum{0}%
+ \def\thissecnum{0}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+ %
+ % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+ % al. a second time, below.
+ \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+ \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+ \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+ \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+ \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+ \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+ \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+ \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+ \readdatafile{toc}%
+ %
+ % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+ % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+ % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+ %
+ % We use the node names as the destinations.
+ \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+ %
+ % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+ % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+ % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
+ % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
+ % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+ %
+ % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+ % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
+ % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \setupdatafile
+ \activebackslash
\input \jobname.toc
- \endgroup\fi
- }}
- \def\makelinks #1,{%
- \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
- \ifx\params\E
- \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
- \else
- \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
- \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
- \picknum{#1}%
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
- goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
- \linkcolor #1%
- \advance\lnkcount by 1%
- \endlink
- \fi
- \nextmakelinks
- }
- \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
- \def\pn#1{%
- \def\p{#1}%
- \ifx\p\lbrace
- \let\nextpn=\ppn
- \else
- \let\nextpn=\ppnn
- \def\first{#1}
- \fi
- \nextpn
+ \endgroup
}
- \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
- \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
- \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
- \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+ %
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
\def\pdfurl#1{%
\begingroup
\normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
- \let\value=\expandablevalue
+ \makevalueexpandable
\leavevmode\Red
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
- % #1
\endgroup}
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
\def\maketoks{%
- \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
+ \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
\ifx\first0\adn0
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
- \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+ \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
\else
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
\linkcolor #1\endlink}
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+\else
+ \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+ \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+ \let\endlink = \relax
+ \let\linkcolor = \relax
+ \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
\message{fonts,}
-% Font-change commands.
+
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+ \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+ \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
+}
+
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+%
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+% So we set up a \sf.
\newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
-% We don't need math for this one.
-\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
% Default leading.
\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
\def\scshape{csc}
\def\scbshape{csc}
-\newcount\mainmagstep
-\ifx\bigger\relax
- % not really supported.
- \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
- \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
- \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
-\else
- \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
- \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
- \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\fi
-% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
-% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
-% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
-% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
-\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
-% Fonts for title page:
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\authortt{\sectt}
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
-% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
}
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
-% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
-% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
-% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
-% redefine \bf itself.
+% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
\def\textfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
- \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+ \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{text}%
+ \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
\def\titlefonts{%
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+ \def\curfontsize{title}%
+ \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
\def\chapfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
- \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+ \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+ \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
\def\secfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
- \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+ \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+ \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
\def\subsecfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
- \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+ \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+ \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+\def\reducedfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+ \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+ \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+ \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{small}%
+ \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallerfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+ \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
-\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
+%
+% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
%
-\textfonts
+\textfonts \rm
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
% Fonts for short table of contents.
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
+ \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
+% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
\let\var=\smartslanted
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
\let\emph=\smartitalic
-\let\cite=\smartslanted
+% @b, explicit bold.
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
\let\strong=\b
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+ \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+ \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+ \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+ \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+ }
+ \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+ \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
+ \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
+ \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+ }
+\catcode`@=\other
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+
\def\t#1{%
- {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+ {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
\null
}
-\let\ttfont=\t
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
\font\keysy=cmsy9
\nohyphenation
%
\rawbackslash
- \frenchspacing
+ \plainfrenchspacing
#1%
}%
\null
}
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
\catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
\codex
}
- %
- % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
- % just treat them as a normal -.
- \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
}
\def\realdash{-}
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
-\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
\def\arg{#1}%
\ifx\arg\worddistinct
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
\else\ifx\arg\wordcode
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
\def\wordexample{example}
\def\wordcode{code}
-% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
-% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
-\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+% Default is `distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
\def\xkey{\key}
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
-% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\url=\code
+% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\indicateurl=\code
\let\env=\code
\let\command=\code
\endlink
\endgroup}
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
-%
+%
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
\ifpdf
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
-% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
-\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+%
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+ {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else
+ \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+%
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+ {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else
+ \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+ \fi
+}
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+%
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+% font height.
+%
+% feymr - regular
+% feymo - slanted
+% feybr - bold
+% feybo - bold slanted
+%
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+% Hmm.
+%
+% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+% Hope not.
+%
+%
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+\def\eurofont{%
+ % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+ % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+ % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
+ % font installed.
+ %
+ % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+ % that to the current nominal size.
+ %
+ % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+ % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+ %
+ \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+ %
+ \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+ % bold:
+ \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+ \else
+ % regular:
+ \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+ \fi
+ \thiseurofont
+}
+
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+%
+\def\registeredsymbol{%
+ $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+ \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+ }$%
+}
+
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
+% so we'll define it if necessary.
+%
+\ifx\Orb\undefined
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+\fi
+
\message{page headings,}
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
-\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
-\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
- \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
- \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
- %
- \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
- %
- % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
- \vglue\titlepagetopglue
- %
- % Now you can print the title using @title.
- \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
- \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
- % print a rule at the page bottom also.
- \finishedtitlepagefalse
- \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
- % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
- \finishedtitlepagetrue
- %
- % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
- \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
- \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
- %
- % @author should come last, but may come many times.
- \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
- \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
- {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
- %
- % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
- % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
- \let\oldpage = \page
- \def\page{%
+\envdef\titlepage{%
+ % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+ % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+ \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+ % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+ %
+ % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+ % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+ \let\oldpage = \page
+ \def\page{%
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
- \finishtitlepage
+ \finishtitlepage
\fi
- \oldpage
\let\page = \oldpage
- \hbox{}}%
-% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+ \page
+ \null
+ }%
}
\def\Etitlepage{%
- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
- \finishtitlepage
- \fi
- % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
- % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
- % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
- % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
- \oldpage
- \endgroup
- %
- % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
- % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
- \HEADINGSon
- %
- % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
- \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
- \shortcontents
- \contents
- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
- \global\let\contents = \relax
- \fi
- %
- \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
- \contents
- \global\let\contents = \relax
- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
- \fi
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+ % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+ % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+ % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+ \oldpage
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+ % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+ \HEADINGSon
+ %
+ % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+ \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \shortcontents
+ \contents
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \contents
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \fi
}
\def\finishtitlepage{%
- \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
- \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
- \finishedtitlepagetrue
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+ \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
+\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+
+\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+ \let\tt=\authortt}
+
+\parseargdef\title{%
+ \checkenv\titlepage
+ \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
+ % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+ \finishedtitlepagefalse
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
}
+\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+ \checkenv\titlepage
+ {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+}
+
+% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+%
+\parseargdef\author{%
+ \def\temp{\quotation}%
+ \ifx\thisenv\temp
+ \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+ \else
+ \checkenv\titlepage
+ \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+ {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
\let\thispage=\folio
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
-% Now make Tex use those variables
+% Now make TeX use those variables
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
-
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
-
-{\catcode`\@=0 %
-\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
-\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
%
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
}
-\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
-%
-}% unbind the catcode of @.
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
-\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\def\HEADINGSoff{%
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
\HEADINGSoff
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
% edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
% page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
% It generates no output of its own.
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
-\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
\message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
% default indentation of table text
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
\newdimen\itemmax
-% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
% these defs.
% They also define \itemindex
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
-\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-
-\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-
-\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
- \itemzzz {#1}}
-
-\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
- \itemzzz {#1}}
-
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
- \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
\itemindex{#1}%
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
%
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
%
- % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
- % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
- % \baselineskip glue.
- \nobreak
+ % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
+ % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+ % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+ % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
+ % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+ % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
+ %
+ \penalty 10001
\endgroup
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
\else
\fi
}
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
-\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
-\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
-\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
-\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
-
-% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
-\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
-
-\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
-\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
-\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\dontindex #1{}
-\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
-\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
-
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
-\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
-
-\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\begingroup %
-\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
-\let\itemindex=#1%
-\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
-\def\itemfont{#2}%
-\itemmax=\tableindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
-\exdentamount=\tableindent
-\parindent = 0pt
-\parskip = \smallskipamount
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\item = \internalBitem %
-\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
-\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
-\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
-\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
-\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+\envdef\table{%
+ \let\itemindex\gobble
+ \tablecheck{table}%
+}
+\envdef\ftable{%
+ \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+ \tablecheck{ftable}%
+}
+\envdef\vtable{%
+ \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+ \tablecheck{vtable}%
+}
+\def\tablecheck#1{%
+ \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+ \endgroup
+ \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+ that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+ \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \let\next\tablex
+ \fi
+ \next
}
+\def\tablex#1{%
+ \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+ \parsearg\tabley
+}
+\def\tabley#1{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+ \expandafter
+ }\temp \endtablez
+}
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+ \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+ \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+ \itemmax=\tableindent
+ \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+ \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+ \exdentamount=\tableindent
+ \parindent = 0pt
+ \parskip = \smallskipamount
+ \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+ \let\item = \internalBitem
+ \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+}
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+\let\Eftable\Etable
+\let\Evtable\Etable
+\let\Eitemize\Etable
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
\newcount \itemno
-\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
-\def\itemizezzz #1{%
- \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
- \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+\def\doitemize#1{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \itemmax=\itemindent
+ \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+ \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+ \exdentamount=\itemindent
+ \parindent=0pt
+ \parskip=\smallskipamount
+ \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+ \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+ % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+ \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+ \let\item=\itemizeitem
}
-\def\itemizey #1#2{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\itemmax=\itemindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
-\exdentamount=\itemindent
-\parindent = 0pt %
-\parskip = \smallskipamount %
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\def\itemcontents{#1}%
-\let\item=\itemizeitem}
-
-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
-% These are `.?!:;,'
-\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
- \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+%
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+ \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
+ {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+ {%
+ % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+ % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+ % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
+ % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
+ % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+ % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+ % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
+ % that's the theory.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+ \noindent
+ \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+ \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+ \flushcr
+}
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
% argument is the same as `1'.
%
-\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
-\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
- \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
- %
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
\def\thearg{#1}%
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
}%
}
-% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
%
\def\startenumeration#1{%
\advance\itemno by -1
- \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+ \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
}
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
-
-\def\itemizeitem{%
-\advance\itemno by 1
-{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
-\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
-{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
-\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
-\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
-\flushcr}
% @multitable macros
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
% @item ...
% using the widest term desired in each column.
-%
-% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
-% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
-% will parse correctly, i.e.,
-%
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
-% template}
-% Not:
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
-% {Column 3 template}
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
-% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
-% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+% if they are.
% Sample multitable:
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
\newif\ifsetpercent
-% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
-% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
-% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
-% percent of \hsize for this column.
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
+%
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
\global\advance\colcount by 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
\setuptable
}
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
\else
\global\advance\colcount by 1
- \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
- % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+ \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+ % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
\fi
\fi
\go
}
-% This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is
-% not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we
-% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
-% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
-\def\tab{&}
+% multitable-only commands.
+%
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
+% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
+% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
+\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
+%
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
+% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
+% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
+% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
%
-\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
-\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
+%
+\envdef\multitable{%
\vskip\parskip
- \let\item\crcr
+ \startsavinginserts
+ %
+ % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+ % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+ % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+ % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+ \def\item{\crcr}%
+ %
\tolerance=9500
\hbadness=9500
\setmultitablespacing
\parindent=\multitableparindent
\overfullrule=0pt
\global\colcount=0
- \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
%
+ \everycr = {%
+ \noalign{%
+ \global\everytab={}%
+ \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+ % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+ \checkinserts
+ % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+ %\filbreak
+ % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
+ % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
+ % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+ }%
+ }%
+ %
+ \parsearg\domultitable
+}
+\def\domultitable#1{%
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
%
- % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
- % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
- % The table preamble
- % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
- \everycr{\noalign{%
- %
- % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
- % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
- % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
- % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
- \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
- %
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
- \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
- \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
- %
- % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
- % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
- % the first one.
- %
- % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
- % to the width of each template entry.
- %
- % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
- % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
- % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
- % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
- %
- % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
- \rightskip=0pt
- \ifnum\colcount=1
- % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
- \advance\hsize by\leftskip
- \else
- \ifsetpercent \else
- % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
- % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
- \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
- \fi
- % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
- \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
- \fi
- % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
- % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
- % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
- % For example:
- % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
- % @item @code{#}
- % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
- % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
- % characters.
- \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
-% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
-% current baselineskip.
+ \halign\bgroup &%
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1
+ \multistrut
+ \vtop{%
+ % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+ \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+ %
+ % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+ % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+ % the first one.
+ %
+ % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+ % to the width of each template entry.
+ %
+ % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+ % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+ % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
+ % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+ %
+ % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+ \rightskip=0pt
+ \ifnum\colcount=1
+ % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+ \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent \else
+ % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+ % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+ \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+ \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+ % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+ % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+ % For example:
+ % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+ % @item @code{#}
+ % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+ % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+ % marking characters.
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+ }\cr
+}
+\def\Emultitable{%
+ \crcr
+ \egroup % end the \halign
+ \global\setpercentfalse
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+ \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+ %
+ % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+ % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
+ % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+ % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
-%% to keep lines equally spaced
-\let\multistrut = \strut
-\else
-%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
-\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
-width0pt\relax} \fi
+\fi
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
%% table. If not, do nothing.
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
\message{conditionals,}
-% Prevent errors for section commands.
-% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
-\def\ignoresections{%
- \let\chapter=\relax
- \let\unnumbered=\relax
- \let\top=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
- \let\section=\relax
- \let\subsec=\relax
- \let\subsubsec=\relax
- \let\subsection=\relax
- \let\subsubsection=\relax
- \let\appendix=\relax
- \let\appendixsec=\relax
- \let\appendixsection=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
- \let\contents=\relax
- \let\smallbook=\relax
- \let\titlepage=\relax
-}
-
-% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
-% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
-% incorrectly.
-%
-\def\ignoremorecommands{%
- \let\defcodeindex = \relax
- \let\defcv = \relax
- \let\deffn = \relax
- \let\deffnx = \relax
- \let\defindex = \relax
- \let\defivar = \relax
- \let\defmac = \relax
- \let\defmethod = \relax
- \let\defop = \relax
- \let\defopt = \relax
- \let\defspec = \relax
- \let\deftp = \relax
- \let\deftypefn = \relax
- \let\deftypefun = \relax
- \let\deftypeivar = \relax
- \let\deftypeop = \relax
- \let\deftypevar = \relax
- \let\deftypevr = \relax
- \let\defun = \relax
- \let\defvar = \relax
- \let\defvr = \relax
- \let\ref = \relax
- \let\xref = \relax
- \let\printindex = \relax
- \let\pxref = \relax
- \let\settitle = \relax
- \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
- \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
- \let\everyheading = \relax
- \let\evenheading = \relax
- \let\oddheading = \relax
- \let\everyfooting = \relax
- \let\evenfooting = \relax
- \let\oddfooting = \relax
- \let\headings = \relax
- \let\include = \relax
- \let\lowersections = \relax
- \let\down = \relax
- \let\raisesections = \relax
- \let\up = \relax
- \let\set = \relax
- \let\clear = \relax
- \let\item = \relax
-}
-
-% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
-% @direntry, and @documentdescription.
+
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+% attempt to close an environment group.
%
-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\makecond#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+}
+\makecond{iftex}
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+\makecond{ifnothtml}
+\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+\makecond{ifnotxml}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
-\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
-\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
-\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
-
-% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory = \comment
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
%
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+\newcount\doignorecount
+
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
- % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
- \ignoresections
- %
- % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
- % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
- % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
- \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+ % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+ \catcode`\@ = \other
+ \catcode`\{ = \other
+ \catcode`\} = \other
%
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
- \catcode32 = 10
- %
- % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
- \catcode`\{ = 9
- \catcode`\} = 9
- %
- % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
- \catcode`\@ = 12
+ \spaceisspace
%
- \def\ignoreword{#1}%
- \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
- % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
- % `documentdescription' contains a `c'. Means not everything will
- % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
- \else
- % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
- % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
- % @c @end ifinfo
- % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
- % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
- \catcode`\c = 14
- \fi
+ % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+ \doignorecount = 0
%
- % And now expand the command defined above.
- \doignoretext
-}
-
-% What we do to finish off ignored text.
-%
-\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
-
-\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
-\def\obstexwarn{%
- \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
- % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
- % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
- \immediate\write16{}
- \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
- \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
- \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
- \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
- \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
- \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
- \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
- \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
- \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
- \immediate\write16{}
- \global\warnedobstrue
- \fi
+ % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+ \dodoignore{#1}%
}
-% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
-% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
-% uncomment the following line:
-%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
-
-% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
-% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
-%
-\def\nestedignore#1{%
- \obstexwarn
- % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
- % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
- % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
- % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
- % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+ \obeylines %
%
- \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
- % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
- \ignoresections
- %
- % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
- % @end command again.
- \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
- %
- % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
- % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
- % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
- % undefine them.
- %
- % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
- % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
- \ignoremorecommands
+ \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+ % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
%
- % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
- % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
- % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
- % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
- % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
- % stuff compared to the main input.
+ % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
+ % by itself.
+ \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
+ % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+ % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+ % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+ \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
%
- \nullfont
- \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
- \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
- \let\tensf=\nullfont
- % Similarly for index fonts.
- \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
- \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
- \let\smallsf=\nullfont
- % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
- \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
- \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
- \let\smallersf=\nullfont
- %
- % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
- \tracinglostchars = 0
- %
- % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
- \frenchspacing
- %
- % Don't report underfull hboxes.
- \hbadness = 10000
- %
- % Do minimal line-breaking.
- \pretolerance = 10000
- %
- % Do not execute instructions in @tex
- \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
- % Do not execute macro definitions.
- % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
- \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+ % And now expand that command.
+ \obeylines %
+ \doignoretext ^^M%
+ }%
+}
+
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
+ \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+ \else % Found a nested condition, ...
+ \advance\doignorecount by 1
+ \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
+ % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+ \fi
+ \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+}
+
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+%
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+ \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
+ \let\next\enddoignore
+ \else % Still inside a nested condition.
+ \advance\doignorecount by -1
+ \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
+ \fi
+ \next
}
+% Finish off ignored text.
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
%
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
-% losing inside @example, for instance.
+% didn't need it.
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
%
-\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
- \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
- \parsearg\setxxx}
-\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
- \def\temp{#2}%
- \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
- \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
- \fi
- \endgroup
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty
+ \next{}%
+ \else
+ \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+ \fi
+ }%
}
-% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
-% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
-% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
-\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
%
-\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
-\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+\parseargdef\clear{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+ }%
+}
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
{
- \catcode`\_ = \active
+ \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
%
- % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
- % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
- % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
- \gdef\value{\begingroup
- \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
- \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
- \valuexxx}
+ \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+ \let\value = \expandablevalue
+ % We don't want these characters active, ...
+ \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+ % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+ % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+ % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+ \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
+ }
}
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
-% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
-% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
-% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
-% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
-% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
-% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
%
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
+ \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
\else
\csname SET#1\endcsname
\fi
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
% with @set.
%
-\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
-\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifsetfail
- \else
- \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
- \fi
+% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
+%
+\makecond{ifset}
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+\def\doifset#1#2{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \let\next=\empty
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+ #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+ \fi
+ \expandafter
+ }\next
}
-\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
-\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
%
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
-\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
- \else
- \expandafter\ifclearfail
- \fi
-}
-\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
-% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make
-% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
-%
-\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
-\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
-\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
-\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
-\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
-
-% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
-% @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
-% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
-% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
-% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
-% the @ifset might be nested.)
-%
-\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
- \edef\temp{%
- % Remember the current value of \E#1.
- \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
- %
- % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
- \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
- }%
- \temp
-}
-
-% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
-% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
%
-\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+\makecond{ifclear}
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory=\comment
% @defininfoenclose.
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
% Index generation facilities
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
-%
+%
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
% inside @code.
-%
+%
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
-% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
-% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
-% laboriously list every single command here.)
-%
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+%
\def\indexdummies{%
-\def\ { }%
-\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
-% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
-% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
-% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
-\let\{ = \mylbrace
-\let\} = \myrbrace
-\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
-\normalturnoffactive
-%
-% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
-\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
-\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
-\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
-\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
-\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
-\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
-\def\={\realbackslash =}%
-\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
-\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
-\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
-\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
-\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
-\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
-\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
-% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
-\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
-\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
-\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
-\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
-\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
-\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
-\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
-\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
-\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
-\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
-\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
-%
-% Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
-\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
-\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
-\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
-\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
-%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
-\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
-\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
-\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
-\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
-%
-\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
-\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
-\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
-\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
-\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
-%
-\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
-\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
-\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
-\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
-\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
-\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
-\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
-\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
-\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
-\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
-\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
-\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
-\def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
-\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
-\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
-\def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
-\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
-\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
-\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
-\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
-%
-% These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
-\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
-\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
-\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
-\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
-\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
-\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
-\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
-%
-% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
-% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
-% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
-\let\value = \expandablevalue
-%
-\unsepspaces
-% Turn off macro expansion
-\turnoffmacros
-}
-
-% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
-% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
-% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
-{\obeyspaces
- \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
-
-% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
-% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
-\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
-\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
-\def\indexdummydots{...}
+ \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+ \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+ % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+ % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+ % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+ \let\{ = \mylbrace
+ \let\} = \myrbrace
+ %
+ % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
+ % effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control
+ % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
+ % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+ % from whatever follows.
+ %
+ % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+ % space.
+ %
+ % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+ % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+ % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+ %
+ \def\definedummyword##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
+ }%
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
+ }%
+ \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+ %
+ % Do the redefinitions.
+ \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
+% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
+% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
+% this will be simpler.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+ \def\@{@@}%
+ \def\ {@ }%
+ \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+ \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+ %
+ % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
+ \def\definedummyword##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
+ }%
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
+ }%
+ \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+ %
+ % Do the redefinitions.
+ \commondummies
+}
+
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and
+% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
+%
+\def\commondummies{%
+ %
+ \normalturnoffactive
+ %
+ \commondummiesnofonts
+ %
+ \definedummyletter{_}%
+ %
+ % Non-English letters.
+ \definedummyword{AA}%
+ \definedummyword{AE}%
+ \definedummyword{L}%
+ \definedummyword{OE}%
+ \definedummyword{O}%
+ \definedummyword{aa}%
+ \definedummyword{ae}%
+ \definedummyword{l}%
+ \definedummyword{oe}%
+ \definedummyword{o}%
+ \definedummyword{ss}%
+ \definedummyword{exclamdown}%
+ \definedummyword{questiondown}%
+ \definedummyword{ordf}%
+ \definedummyword{ordm}%
+ %
+ % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+ \definedummyword{bf}%
+ \definedummyword{gtr}%
+ \definedummyword{hat}%
+ \definedummyword{less}%
+ \definedummyword{sf}%
+ \definedummyword{sl}%
+ \definedummyword{tclose}%
+ \definedummyword{tt}%
+ %
+ \definedummyword{LaTeX}%
+ \definedummyword{TeX}%
+ %
+ % Assorted special characters.
+ \definedummyword{bullet}%
+ \definedummyword{comma}%
+ \definedummyword{copyright}%
+ \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
+ \definedummyword{dots}%
+ \definedummyword{enddots}%
+ \definedummyword{equiv}%
+ \definedummyword{error}%
+ \definedummyword{euro}%
+ \definedummyword{expansion}%
+ \definedummyword{minus}%
+ \definedummyword{pounds}%
+ \definedummyword{point}%
+ \definedummyword{print}%
+ \definedummyword{result}%
+ %
+ % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+ % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ %
+ % Normal spaces, not active ones.
+ \unsepspaces
+ %
+ % No macro expansion.
+ \turnoffmacros
+}
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+%
+% Better have this without active chars.
+{
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
+ % Control letters and accents.
+ \definedummyletter{!}%
+ \definedummyaccent{"}%
+ \definedummyaccent{'}%
+ \definedummyletter{*}%
+ \definedummyaccent{,}%
+ \definedummyletter{.}%
+ \definedummyletter{/}%
+ \definedummyletter{:}%
+ \definedummyaccent{=}%
+ \definedummyletter{?}%
+ \definedummyaccent{^}%
+ \definedummyaccent{`}%
+ \definedummyaccent{~}%
+ \definedummyword{u}%
+ \definedummyword{v}%
+ \definedummyword{H}%
+ \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
+ \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{dotless}%
+ %
+ % Texinfo font commands.
+ \definedummyword{b}%
+ \definedummyword{i}%
+ \definedummyword{r}%
+ \definedummyword{sc}%
+ \definedummyword{t}%
+ %
+ % Commands that take arguments.
+ \definedummyword{acronym}%
+ \definedummyword{cite}%
+ \definedummyword{code}%
+ \definedummyword{command}%
+ \definedummyword{dfn}%
+ \definedummyword{emph}%
+ \definedummyword{env}%
+ \definedummyword{file}%
+ \definedummyword{kbd}%
+ \definedummyword{key}%
+ \definedummyword{math}%
+ \definedummyword{option}%
+ \definedummyword{samp}%
+ \definedummyword{strong}%
+ \definedummyword{tie}%
+ \definedummyword{uref}%
+ \definedummyword{url}%
+ \definedummyword{var}%
+ \definedummyword{verb}%
+ \definedummyword{w}%
+ }
+}
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
\def\indexnofonts{%
-\def\@{@}%
-% how to handle braces?
-\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
-%
-\let\,=\indexdummyfont
-\let\"=\indexdummyfont
-\let\`=\indexdummyfont
-\let\'=\indexdummyfont
-\let\^=\indexdummyfont
-\let\~=\indexdummyfont
-\let\==\indexdummyfont
-\let\b=\indexdummyfont
-\let\c=\indexdummyfont
-\let\d=\indexdummyfont
-\let\u=\indexdummyfont
-\let\v=\indexdummyfont
-\let\H=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
-% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
-\def\AA{AA}%
-\def\AE{AE}%
-\def\L{L}%
-\def\OE{OE}%
-\def\O{O}%
-\def\aa{aa}%
-\def\ae{ae}%
-\def\l{l}%
-\def\oe{oe}%
-\def\o{o}%
-\def\ss{ss}%
-%
-% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
-% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
-% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
-%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
-%
-\let\b=\indexdummyfont
-\let\i=\indexdummyfont
-\let\r=\indexdummyfont
-\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
-\let\t=\indexdummyfont
-%
-\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
-\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
-\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
-\let\code=\indexdummyfont
-\let\command=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dots=\indexdummydots
-\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
-\let\env=\indexdummyfont
-\let\file=\indexdummyfont
-\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
-\let\key=\indexdummyfont
-\let\math=\indexdummyfont
-\let\option=\indexdummyfont
-\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
-\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
-\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
-\let\url=\indexdummyfont
-\let\var=\indexdummyfont
-\let\w=\indexdummyfont
-}
-
-% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
-% We must first make another character (@) an escape
-% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
-
-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
- @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+ % Accent commands should become @asis.
+ \def\definedummyaccent##1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
+ }%
+ % We can just ignore other control letters.
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}%
+ }%
+ % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
+ \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
+ %
+ \commondummiesnofonts
+ %
+ % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+ % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+ % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+ %\let\tt=\asis
+ %
+ \def\ { }%
+ \def\@{@}%
+ % how to handle braces?
+ \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+ %
+ % Non-English letters.
+ \def\AA{AA}%
+ \def\AE{AE}%
+ \def\L{L}%
+ \def\OE{OE}%
+ \def\O{O}%
+ \def\aa{aa}%
+ \def\ae{ae}%
+ \def\l{l}%
+ \def\oe{oe}%
+ \def\o{o}%
+ \def\ss{ss}%
+ \def\exclamdown{!}%
+ \def\questiondown{?}%
+ \def\ordf{a}%
+ \def\ordm{o}%
+ %
+ \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+ \def\TeX{TeX}%
+ %
+ % Assorted special characters.
+ % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+ \def\bullet{bullet}%
+ \def\comma{,}%
+ \def\copyright{copyright}%
+ \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
+ \def\dots{...}%
+ \def\enddots{...}%
+ \def\equiv{==}%
+ \def\error{error}%
+ \def\euro{euro}%
+ \def\expansion{==>}%
+ \def\minus{-}%
+ \def\pounds{pounds}%
+ \def\point{.}%
+ \def\print{-|}%
+ \def\result{=>}%
+ %
+ % Don't write macro names.
+ \emptyusermacros
+}
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
-% For \ifx comparisons.
-\def\emptymacro{\empty}
-
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-%
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
-% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
%
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+ \iflinks
+ {%
+ % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+ \toks0 = {#2}%
+ % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+ \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+ \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+ %
+ \ifvmode
+ \dosubindsanitize
+ \else
+ \dosubindwrite
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+%
+\def\dosubindwrite{%
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
- \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+ \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
\fi
- {%
- \count255=\lastpenalty
- {%
- \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
- \escapechar=`\\
- {%
- \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
- \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
- % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
- %
- \def\thirdarg{#3}%
- %
- % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
- \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
- \let\subentry = \empty
- \else
- \def\subentry{ #3}%
- \fi
- %
- % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
- % off to get the string to sort by.
- {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
- %
- % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
- \toks0 = {#2}%
- %
- % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
- % line to write.
- \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
- \fi
- %
- % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
- % the original text, including any font commands. We write
- % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
- % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
- % sorted result.
- \edef\temp{%
- \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
- \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
- }%
- %
- % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
- % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
- % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
- % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
- % like this:
- % @end defun
- % @tindex whatever
- % @defun ...
- % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
- % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
- % the previous defun.
- %
- % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
- % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
- %
- % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
- %
- \iflinks
- \ifvmode
- \skip0 = \lastskip
- \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
- \fi
- %
- \temp % do the write
- %
- %
- \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
- \fi
- }%
- }%
- \penalty\count255
+ %
+ % Remember, we are within a group.
+ \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+ \escapechar=`\\
+ \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+ % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+ %
+ % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+ % get the string to sort by.
+ {\indexnofonts
+ \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+ \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+ % the original text, including any font commands. We write
+ % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+ % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+ % sorted result.
+ \edef\temp{%
+ \write\writeto{%
+ \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
}%
+ \temp
+}
+
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
+%
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
+% like this:
+% @end defun
+% @tindex whatever
+% @defun ...
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+% the previous defun.
+%
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+%
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+%
+% But wait, there is a catch there:
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
+% representation of the skip.
+%
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+%
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
+%
+% ..., ready, GO:
+%
+\def\dosubindsanitize{%
+ % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+ \skip0 = \lastskip
+ \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+ \count255 = \lastpenalty
+ %
+ % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+ % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+ % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+ % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+ % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+ \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+ \else
+ \vskip-\skip0
+ \fi
+ %
+ \dosubindwrite
+ %
+ \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+ % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+ % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
+ % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+ % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+ % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
+ %
+ % @deffn deffn-whatever
+ % @vindex index-whatever
+ % Description.
+ % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+ % and the "Description." paragraph.
+ \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
+ \else
+ % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+ % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+ % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+ \nobreak\vskip\skip0
+ \fi
}
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
%
-\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
-\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
%
\smallfonts \rm
\tolerance = 9500
- \indexbreaks
+ \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
%
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
% to make right now.
- \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+ \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
\catcode`\\ = 0
\escapechar = `\\
\begindoublecolumns
\removelastskip
%
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
- \penalty -300
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
+ \penalty 0
+ \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
%
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
- \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
- %
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
\nobreak
+ \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
}}
-% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
-% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
-% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
+% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
%
-\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
- %
- % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
- % affect previous text.
- \par
- %
- % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
- \parfillskip = 0in
- %
- % No extra space above this paragraph.
- \parskip = 0in
- %
- % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
- \finalhyphendemerits = 0
- %
- % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
- % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
- % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
- % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
- % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
- %
- % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
- % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
- \hangindent = 2em
- %
- % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
- % with blank space.
- \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
- %
- % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
- \vskip 0pt plus1pt
- %
- % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
- % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
- \noindent
- %
- % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
- #1%
- % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
- % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
- % cursed by a Unix daemon.
- \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
- \def\tempb{#2}%
- \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
- \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
- \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
+% \def\entry#1#2{...
+% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
+% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
+% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
+%
+% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
+% --kasal, 21nov03
+\def\entry{%
+ \begingroup
+ %
+ % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+ % affect previous text.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+ \parfillskip = 0in
+ %
+ % No extra space above this paragraph.
+ \parskip = 0in
+ %
+ % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+ \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+ %
+ % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+ % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
+ % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
+ % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+ % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
%
- % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
- % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
- % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
- \hfil\penalty50
- \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+ % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+ % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+ \hangindent = 2em
%
- % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
- % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
- % \hbox ensues.
- \ifpdf
- \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+ % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+ % with blank space.
+ \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+ %
+ % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
+ % columns.
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+ %
+ % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+ \afterassignment\doentry
+ \let\temp =
+}
+\def\doentry{%
+ \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+ \noindent
+ \aftergroup\finishentry
+ % And now comes the text of the entry.
+}
+\def\finishentry#1{%
+ % #1 is the page number.
+ %
+ % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+ % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
+ % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+ \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+ \def\tempb{#1}%
+ \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+ \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+ \ifx\tempc\tempd
+ \ %
\else
- \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+ %
+ % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+ % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+ % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+ \hfil\penalty50
+ \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+ %
+ % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+ % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
+ % \hbox ensues.
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfgettoks#1.%
+ \ \the\toksA
+ \else
+ \ #1%
+ \fi
\fi
- \fi%
- \par
-\endgroup}
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+}
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
}
-%
+%
% All done with double columns.
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
\output = {%
\message{sectioning,}
% Chapters, sections, etc.
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
+% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
\newcount\chapno
\newcount\secno \secno=0
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
+%
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+%
\def\appendixletter{%
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
+% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
\def\thischapter{}
\def\thissection{}
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
-% Choose a numbered-heading macro
-% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
-% #2 is text for heading
-\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
- \chapterzzz{#2}
-\or
- \seczzz{#2}
-\or
- \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
- \ifnum \absseclevel<0
- \chapterzzz{#2}
+% we only have subsub.
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+%
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
+%
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+\def\chapheadtype{N}
+
+% Choose a heading macro
+% #1 is heading type
+% #2 is heading level
+% #3 is text for heading
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+ % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+ \absseclevel=#2
+ \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+ % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+ \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+ \absseclevel = 0
\else
- \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+ \absseclevel = 3
+ \fi
\fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
-\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
- \appendixzzz{#2}
-\or
- \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
-\or
- \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
- \ifnum \absseclevel<0
- \appendixzzz{#2}
+ % The heading type:
+ \def\headtype{#1}%
+ \if \headtype U%
+ \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
+ \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
+ \fi
\else
- \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ % Check for appendix sections:
+ \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+ \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+ \else
+ \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+ \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+ \fi\fi
+ \fi
+ % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+ \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
+ \def\headtype{U}%
+ \else
+ \chardef\unmlevel = 3
+ \fi
\fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
-\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
- \unnumberedzzz{#2}
-\or
- \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
- \ifnum \absseclevel<0
- \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+ % Now print the heading:
+ \if \headtype U%
+ \ifcase\absseclevel
+ \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+ \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \fi
\else
- \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \if \headtype A%
+ \ifcase\absseclevel
+ \appendixzzz{#3}%
+ \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+ \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase\absseclevel
+ \chapterzzz{#3}%
+ \or \seczzz{#3}%
+ \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
\fi
-\fi
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% an interface:
+\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+%
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+%
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+ % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+ % as an @include file.
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance\chapno by 1
+ %
+ % Used for \float.
+ \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+ \resetallfloatnos
+ %
+ \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+ %
+ % Write the actual heading.
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+ %
+ % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+ \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+ \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+ \resetallfloatnos
+ %
+ \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+ \message{\appendixnum}%
+ %
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+ %
+ \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
}
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
-\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
-\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
-\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
-\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
-% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
-\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\the\chapno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
-\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-\global\advance \appendixno by 1
-\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
-\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\appendixletter}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\global\let\section = \appendixsec
-\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+ %
+ % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+ \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+ \resetallfloatnos
+ %
+ % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+ % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+ % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+ % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+ % to be executed, not expanded).
+ %
+ % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+ % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
+ % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+ % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
+ % the toc entries.)
+ \toks0 = {#1}%
+ \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+ %
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+ %
+ \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
}
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
-\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+ % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
+ % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
+ % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
+ \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+ \unnmhead0{#1}%
+ \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+}
% @top is like @unnumbered.
-\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-
-\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-%
-% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
-% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
-% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
-% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
-% to be executed, not expanded).
-%
-% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
-% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
-% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
-% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
-% the toc entries.)
-\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
-%
-\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
-\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
-}
+\let\top\unnumbered
% Sections.
-\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
-\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz #1{%
-\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
-\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
-\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
- {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+}
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
}
% Subsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
-\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
-\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
-\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
- {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+ {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+ {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}
% Subsubsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
-\subsubsecheading {#1}
- {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
-\subsubsecheading {#1}
- {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
- {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
- {\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
-% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
-\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
-\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
-\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+ {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+ {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+ {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+\let\section = \numberedsec
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
-\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
-\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
-{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
-{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+\def\majorheading{%
+ {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+ \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+}
-\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
-{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+ {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}%
+ \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
-\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
-\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
\CHAPPAGon
-\def\CHAPFplain{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
-
-% Plain chapter opening.
-% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
-\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+% Chapter opening.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+%
+% To test against our argument.
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+%
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
\pchapsepmacro
{%
\chapfonts \rm
- \def\chapnum{#2}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+ %
+ % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
+ % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
+ % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+ %
+ % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+ % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+ \def\temptype{#2}%
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+ \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+ \gdef\thischapter{#1}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+ \def\toctype{omit}%
+ \gdef\thischapter{}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{app}%
+ % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+ % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't
+ % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
+ %
+ \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
+ \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+ \else
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{numchap}%
+ \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
+ \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ %
+ % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
+ % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+ % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+ \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+ %
+ % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+ % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+ % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+ % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+ % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+ \donoderef{#2}%
+ %
+ % Typeset the actual heading.
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
- \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+ \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
}%
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
\nobreak
}
-% Plain opening for unnumbered.
-\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
-
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
- \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
- \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
- \leftskip = \rightskip
- \parfillskip = 0pt
- }%
- \chfplain{#1}{}%
-}}
+\def\centerparameters{%
+ \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+ \leftskip = \rightskip
+ \parfillskip = 0pt
+}
-\CHAPFplain % The default
+% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
+% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
+%
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+%
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
}
-
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
\par\penalty 5000 %
}
-
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
\parindent=0pt
\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
}
-
-\def\CHAPFopen{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+\def\CHAPFopen{%
+ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+ \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
-% Section titles.
+% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+%
\newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
-\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
-\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
% Subsection titles.
-\newskip \subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
-\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
% Subsubsection titles.
-\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
-\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
-\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
-% Print any size section title.
+% Print any size, any type, section title.
%
-% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
-% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
- {%
- \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
- \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
- }%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
+% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
+% section number.
+%
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
{%
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
- \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+ \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
+ %
+ % Insert space above the heading.
+ \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
%
- % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
- \def\secnum{#2}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+ % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+ \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+ \def\temptype{#3}%
%
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+ \def\toctype{unn}%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+ % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+ % and don't redefine \thissection.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+ \def\toctype{omit}%
+ \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{app}%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \else
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{num}%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ %
+ % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chfplain.
+ \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+ %
+ % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+ % Again, see comments in \chfplain.
+ \donoderef{#3}%
+ %
+ % Output the actual section heading.
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
- \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
- \unhbox0 #3}%
+ \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
+ \unhbox0 #1}%
}%
- \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+ % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+ % Don't allow stretch, though.
+ \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+ %
+ % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+ % was followed by glue.
+ \nobreak
+ %
+ % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+ % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+ % discardable item.)
+ \vskip-\parskip
+ %
+ % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
+ % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
+ % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
+ %
+ % @section sec-whatever
+ % @deffn def-whatever
+ \penalty 10001
}
\newwrite\tocfile
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
-% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.
+%
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+% destination to jump to.
%
-% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
-% fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
%
\newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\writetocentry#1{%
- \iftocfileopened\else
- \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
- \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+%
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+ \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+ \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+ \iftocfileopened\else
+ \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+ \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+ \fi
+ %
+ \iflinks
+ {\atdummies \turnoffactive
+ \edef\temp{%
+ \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+ \temp
+ }
+ \fi
\fi
- \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
%
- % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
- % will be the target of the links in the table of contents. We can't
- % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
- % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
- % of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
- % two named `2'.
- \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+ % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+ % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
+ % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+ % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+ % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+ % `1', and two named `2'.
+ \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+
+% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
+% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
+% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
+%
+\def\activecatcodes{%
+ \catcode`\"=\active
+ \catcode`\$=\active
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+ \catcode`\\=\active
+ \catcode`\^=\active
+ \catcode`\_=\active
+ \catcode`\|=\active
+ \catcode`\~=\active
+}
+
+
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+\def\readtocfile{%
+ \setupdatafile
+ \activecatcodes
+ \input \jobname.toc
}
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
\newcount\savepageno
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
-% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
-% to \tocfile.
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
%
\def\startcontents#1{%
- % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
- % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
- % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
- % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
- \contentsalignmacro
- \immediate\closeout\tocfile
- %
- % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
- % It is abundantly clear what they are.
- \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
- \savepageno = \pageno
- \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
- \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
- % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
- % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
- %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
- \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
- \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
- %
- % Roman numerals for page numbers.
- \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+ % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+ % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
+ % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+ % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+ \contentsalignmacro
+ \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+ %
+ % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+ % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+ \def\thischapter{}%
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+ %
+ \savepageno = \pageno
+ \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+ \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+ \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+ %
+ % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+ \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
}
% Normal (long) toc.
\def\contents{%
- \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
- \openin 1 \jobname.toc
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- \input \jobname.toc
- \fi
- \vfill \eject
- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
- \pdfmakeoutlines
- \endgroup
- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
- \pageno = \savepageno
+ \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \readtocfile
+ \fi
+ \vfill \eject
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \pdfmakeoutlines
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno
}
% And just the chapters.
\def\summarycontents{%
- \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
- %
- \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
- \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
- \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
- % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
- \secfonts
- \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
- \rm
- \hyphenpenalty = 10000
- \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
- \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
- \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
- \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
- \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
- \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
- \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
- \openin 1 \jobname.toc
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- \input \jobname.toc
- \fi
- \vfill \eject
- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
- \endgroup
- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
- \pageno = \savepageno
+ \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+ %
+ \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+ % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+ \secfonts
+ \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+ \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+ \rm
+ \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+ \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+ \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \readtocfile
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \vfill \eject
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno
}
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
-\ifpdf
- \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
-\fi
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+ % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+ % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+ % But use \hss just in case.
+ % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+ % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+ %
+ % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+ % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
+ % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+ % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+ % there are before deciding ...
+ \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
% Chapters, in the main contents.
-\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
%
% Chapters, in the short toc.
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
- \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+ \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
}
% Appendices, in the main contents.
-\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
%
-% Appendices, in the short toc.
-\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
-
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
-% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
-% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+ % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+ \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
%
-\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
-%
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
- % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
- % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
- % But use \hss just in case.
- % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
- % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
- \dimen0 = 1em
- \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
-}
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
% Unnumbered chapters.
-\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
-\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
% Sections.
-\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
% Subsections.
-\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
-\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
% And subsubsections.
-\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
-\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
% page number.
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
\endgroup}
-% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
-% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
-% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
-% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
-\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
- % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
- % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
- % have to do the usual translation tricks.
- \entry{#1}{#2}%
-\endgroup}
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
-\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
\message{environments,}
% @foo ... @end foo.
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
-%
+%
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
%
% The @error{} command.
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
-%
+%
\newbox\errorbox
%
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
%
-\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
- \vbox{
+ \vbox{%
\hrule height\dimen2
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
-\def\tex{\begingroup
+\envdef\tex{%
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
- \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+ \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
\catcode `\%=14
- \catcode 43=12 % plus
- \catcode`\"=12
- \catcode`\==12
- \catcode`\|=12
- \catcode`\<=12
- \catcode`\>=12
+ \catcode `\+=\other
+ \catcode `\"=\other
+ \catcode `\|=\other
+ \catcode `\<=\other
+ \catcode `\>=\other
\escapechar=`\\
%
\let\b=\ptexb
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
\let\!=\ptexexclam
\let\i=\ptexi
+ \let\indent=\ptexindent
+ \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
\let\+=\tabalign
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
+ \let\/=\ptexslash
\let\*=\ptexstar
\let\t=\ptext
+ \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
%
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
\def\@{@}%
-\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+}
+% There is no need to define \Etex.
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
-% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
% have any width.
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
-% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
-% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
-% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
-% should produce a line of output anyway.
-%
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
-
-% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
-% for use in \parsearg.
-{\sepspaces%
-\global\let\obeyedspace= }
-
% This space is always present above and below environments.
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
%
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
- \ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
+ % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+ % \sectionheading, q.v.
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
\endgraf
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
\removelastskip
- \penalty-50
+ % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+ % or better ...
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
\vskip\envskipamount
\fi
\fi
%
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
-\long\def\cartouche{%
-\begingroup
- \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
- \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
- \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
- \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
- \cartouter=\hsize
- \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
-% side, and for 6pt waste from
-% each corner char, and rule thickness
- \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
- % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
- \let\nonarrowing=\comment
- \vbox\bgroup
- \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
- \carttop
- \hbox\bgroup
- \hskip\lskip
- \vrule\kern3pt
- \vbox\bgroup
- \hsize=\cartinner
- \kern3pt
- \begingroup
- \baselineskip=\normbskip
- \lineskip=\normlskip
- \parskip=\normpskip
- \vskip -\parskip
+\envdef\cartouche{%
+ \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+ \startsavinginserts
+ \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+ \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+ \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+ \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+ \cartouter=\hsize
+ \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+ % side, and for 6pt waste from
+ % each corner char, and rule thickness
+ \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+ % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+ \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+ \carttop
+ \hbox\bgroup
+ \hskip\lskip
+ \vrule\kern3pt
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \kern3pt
+ \hsize=\cartinner
+ \baselineskip=\normbskip
+ \lineskip=\normlskip
+ \parskip=\normpskip
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
+}
\def\Ecartouche{%
- \endgroup
- \kern3pt
- \egroup
- \kern3pt\vrule
- \hskip\rskip
- \egroup
- \cartbot
- \egroup
-\endgroup
-}}
+ \ifhmode\par\fi
+ \kern3pt
+ \egroup
+ \kern3pt\vrule
+ \hskip\rskip
+ \egroup
+ \cartbot
+ \egroup
+ \checkinserts
+}
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
% inside a group.
\def\nonfillstart{%
\aboveenvbreak
- \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
- \singlespace
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
\parskip = 0pt
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
- \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
- \let\nonarrowing=\relax
\fi
+ \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
}
-% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
-% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
-%
-% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
-% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
-% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
-% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
-% the environment.
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+% This affects the following displayed environments:
+% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
%
-\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+\def\smallword{small}
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+ \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm
+ \fi
+}
+\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+ \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+ \else
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm
+ \fi
+}
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
-\def\lisp{\begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
- \tt
- \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
- \gobble % eat return
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+% Let's do it by one command:
+\def\makedispenv #1#2{
+ \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
+ \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
+ \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+ \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
}
-% @example: Same as @lisp.
-\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+% Define two synonyms:
+\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
+ \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
+ \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
+}
-% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
-% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
-% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
-% whatever) command.
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
%
-% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
-% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
-%
-\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
-\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
-\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-
-% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
- \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \smallexamplefonts
- \lisp
+%
+\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \tt
+ \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+ \gobble % eat return
}
-% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
%
-\def\display{\begingroup
+\makedispenv {display}{%
\nonfillstart
- \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
\gobble
}
-%
-% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
-%
-\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
- \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \smallexamplefonts \rm
- \display
-}
-% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
%
-\def\format{\begingroup
- \let\nonarrowing = t
+\makedispenv{format}{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
- \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
\gobble
}
-%
-% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
-%
-\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
- \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \smallexamplefonts \rm
- \format
-}
-% @flushleft (same as @format).
-%
-\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+\envdef\flushleft{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
% @flushright.
%
-\def\flushright{\begingroup
- \let\nonarrowing = t
+\envdef\flushright{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
- \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
\gobble
}
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins.
+% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
%
-\def\quotation{%
- \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+\envdef\quotation{%
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
- \singlespace
\parindent=0pt
- % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
- % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
- \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
%
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
\fi
+ \parsearg\quotationlabel
+}
+
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+% doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Equotation{%
+ \par
+ \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
+ % indent a bit.
+ \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+ \fi
+ {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else
+ {\bf #1: }%
+ \fi
}
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
-% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
%
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
%
-% [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
\def\dospecials{%
- \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
- \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
+ \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+ \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+ \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+}
%
% [Knuth] p. 380
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
- \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
+ \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
%
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
}
\endgroup
\def\setupverbatim{%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
% Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
\tt
\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
\everypar{\starttabbox}%
}
-% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
-% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
%
% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
%
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
\begingroup
- \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
+ \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
\endgroup
%
%
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
%
-% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
-% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
%
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
-%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
-%% \begingroup
-%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
-%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
-%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
-%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
-%% |endgroup
+%
\begingroup
\catcode`\ =\active
- \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
+ \obeylines %
+ % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+ % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
+ % line in the output.
+ \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+ % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+ % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
\endgroup
%
-\def\verbatim{%
- \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+ \setupverbatim\doverbatim
}
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
%
-% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\verbatiminclude{%
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\\=12
- \catcode`~=12
- \catcode`^=12
- \catcode`_=12
- \catcode`|=12
- \catcode`<=12
- \catcode`>=12
- \catcode`+=12
- \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
-}
-\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
- \begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\setupverbatim
-}
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
%
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
- % Restore active chars for included file.
- \endgroup
- \begingroup
- \def\thisfile{#1}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
- \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \setupverbatim
+ \input #1
+ \afterenvbreak
+ }%
}
% @copying ... @end copying.
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
-%
-\newbox\copyingbox
%
-\def\copying{\begingroup
- \parindent = 0pt % looks wrong on title page
- \def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
- \global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
+%
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
+%
+\def\insertcopying{%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+ \scanexp\copyingtext
+ \endgroup
}
-% @insertcopying.
-%
-\def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
-
-
\message{defuns,}
% @defun etc.
-% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
-\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
-
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
-\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
-\newcount\parencount
-% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
-% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
-\def\activeparens{%
-\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
-\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
-
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-
-{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
-
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
-\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
-
-\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
-\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
-% This is used to turn on special parens
-% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
-\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
-
-% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
-% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
-\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
- \global\advance\parencount by 1
-}
-%
-% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
-\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-%
-\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
- % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
- \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
- \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
-%
-\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
-} % End of definition inside \activeparens
-%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
-%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
-\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
-\let\ampnr = \&
-\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
-\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
-
-% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
-{
- \catcode`& = 13
- \global\let& = \ampnr
-}
-
-% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
-% #1 should be the function name.
-% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
-
-\def\defname #1#2{%
-% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
-% outside the @def...
-\dimen2=\leftskip
-\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
-\noindent
-\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
-\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
-\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
-\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
-% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
-% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
-% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
-{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
-% so that \rightline will obey them.
-\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
-\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
-% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
-\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
-\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
-}
-
-% Actually process the body of a definition
-% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
-% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
-% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
-% such as \defunheader.
-
-\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup %
-\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
-\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
-
-% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
-% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
-% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
-% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
-%
-\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
-
-% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
-% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
-% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
-% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
-% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
-% #5 is the method's return type.
-%
-\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
- \medbreak
- \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
- \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
- \parindent=0in
- \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
-
-% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
-% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
-% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
-% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
-% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
-% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
-%
-\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
- \medbreak
- \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
- \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
- \def#4{##1}%
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
- \parindent=0in
- \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
-
-\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
-\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
-
-% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
-% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
-% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
-
-\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup %
-\catcode 61=\active %
-\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
-
-% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
-% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
-%
-\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup\inENV %
- \medbreak %
- % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
- % so that it will exit this group.
- \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
- \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+ \medbreak
+ \else
+ % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+ % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+ % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+ % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+ % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+ % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+ % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+ %
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
+ %
+ % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+ % But do insert the glue.
+ \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+ \fi
+ %
\parindent=0in
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\obeylines
}
-\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+ % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+ \checkenv#1%
+ %
+ % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+ % It's not a great place, though.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
+ %
+ % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+ \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
}
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
-% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
-% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
-% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
-% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
-%
-% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
-% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
-% won't strip off the braces.
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
%
-\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ % call \deffnheader:
+ #1#2 \endheader
+ % common ending:
+ \interlinepenalty = 10000
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+ \endgraf
+ \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+ \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+ % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+ % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
+ \checkparencounts
+ \endgroup
}
-% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
-% braces (if any). That's what this does.
-%
-\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
-% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
-% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
-% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
%
-\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
- #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
-}%
-
-\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
-\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+ \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+ \temp
+}
-% Split up #2 at the first space token.
-% call #1 with two arguments:
-% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
-% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
-% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
-% and the second is passed as empty.
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
+%
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+%
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+ \envdef#1{%
+ \startdefun
+ \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+ }%
+ \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+ \def#3%
+}
-{\obeylines
-\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
-\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
-\ifx\relax #3%
-#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+%%% Untyped functions:
-% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
-% Define @defun.
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
-% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
-#1%
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
-\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+ % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+ \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
}
-\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
-\boldbraxnoamp
-\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-}
+%%% Typed functions:
-% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
-% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
-\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+ \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}
-% @defun == @deffn Function
-
-\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+%%% Typed variables:
-\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
-% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
-\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
-% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
-\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
-\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+ \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+ \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}
-% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+%%% Untyped variables:
-\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+% @defvr category var args
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
-% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
-% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
-\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
-% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
-% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup
-\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
-% at least some C++ text from working
-\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
-\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defmac == @deffn Macro
-
-\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
-\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+%%% Type:
+% @deftp category name args
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+ \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+ \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
}
-% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
-\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
-
-\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
%
-\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
-\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
%
-\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
-\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
-\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+ % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+ %
+ % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
+ % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+ % just below it.
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+ %
+ % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+ % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+ % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+ \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+ % The continuations:
+ \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+ % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
+ \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
+ %
+ % Put the type name to the right margin.
+ \noindent
+ \hbox to 0pt{%
+ \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+ % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+ \kern\leftskip
+ % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+ }%
+ %
+ % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+ \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+ {%
+ % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+ % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+ % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+ % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
+ % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+ % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+ % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+ % one has made identifiers using them :).
+ \df \tt
+ \def\temp{#2}% return value type
+ \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+ #3% output function name
+ }%
+ {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+ %
+ \boldbrax
+ % arguments will be output next, if any.
}
-% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
%
-\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
- \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
- \deftypeopcategory}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
- \begingroup
- \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
- {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
- \deftypefunargs{#4}%
- \endgroup
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+ % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+ % tt for the names.
+ \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+ %
+ % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+ % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
+ \let\var=\ttslanted
+ #1%
+ \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
}
-% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
-%
-\def\deftypemethod{%
- \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
- \begingroup
- \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
- \deftypefunargs{#4}%
- \endgroup
+\def\activeparens{%
+ \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+ \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+ \catcode`\&=\active
}
-% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
-%
-\def\deftypeivar{%
- \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
-\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
- \begingroup
- \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
- {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
- \defvarargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-% @defmethod == @defop Method
-%
-\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
-\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
- \begingroup
- \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
- \defunargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+ \activeparens
+ \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+ \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+ \global\let& = \&
-% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+ \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+ \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
-\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
-\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+\newcount\parencount
-\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
-\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
-\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+ \ifampseen
+ % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+ % otherwise use the default font.
+ \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+ \else
+ % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+ % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+ \sf
+ \fi
}
-
-% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
-%
-\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
-%
-\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
- \begingroup
- \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
- \defvarargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+ \ifampseen
+ \ifnum\parencount=1
+ #1%
+ \fi
+ \fi
}
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
-% @defvar
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
-% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
-% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
-\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
-
-% @defvr Counter foo-count
-
-\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
-
-\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
-
-% @defvar == @defvr Variable
-
-\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
-
-\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\def\opnr{%
+ \global\advance\parencount by 1
+ {\parenfont(}%
+ \infirstlevel \bfafterword
}
-
-% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
-
-\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
-
-\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\def\clnr{%
+ {\parenfont)}%
+ \infirstlevel \sl
+ \global\advance\parencount by -1
}
-% @deftypevar int foobar
-
-\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
-
-% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
-% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
-\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
-\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-\endgroup}
-\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
-
-\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
-
-\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-\endgroup}
-
-% Now define @deftp
-% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
-
-\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
-
-% @deftp Class window height width ...
-
-\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
-
-\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+ \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+ {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+ {\bf]}%
+ \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+}
-% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
-% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
-%
-\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
-\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
-\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
-\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
-\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
-\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+ \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+ \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+}
+\def\badparencount{%
+ \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
+ \global\parencount=0
+}
+\def\badbrackcount{%
+ \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
+ \global\brackcount=0
+}
\message{macros,}
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
- \newwrite\macscribble
- \def\scanmacro#1{%
- \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
- % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
- \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
- % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
- \toks0={#1\endinput}%
- \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
- \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
- \immediate\closeout\macscribble
- \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
- \input \jobname.tmp
- \endgroup
-}
-\else
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
-\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
-% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
-\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scantokens#1{%
+ \toks0={#1}%
+ \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+ \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+ \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+ \input \jobname.tmp
+ }
\fi
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar`\^^M
+ \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+ % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+ % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+ % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
+ % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
+ % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
+ \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
+ % ... and \example
+ \spaceisspace
+ %
+ % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+ %
+ % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
+ % --kasal, 29nov03
+ \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+ \temp
+}
+
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
% \do\macro1\do\macro2...
% Utility routines.
-% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+%
\def\cslet#1#2{%
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\expandafter\let
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\csname#1\endcsname
-\csname#2\endcsname}
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname#2\endcsname
+}
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
}
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
-{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+\def\scanctxt{%
+ \catcode`\"=\other
+ \catcode`\+=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\@=\other
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{%
+ \scanctxt
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other
+}
+
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
- \catcode`\~=12
- \catcode`\^=12
- \catcode`\_=12
- \catcode`\|=12
- \catcode`\<=12
- \catcode`\>=12
- \catcode`\+=12
- \catcode`\{=12
- \catcode`\}=12
- \catcode`\@=12
- \catcode`\^^M=12
- \usembodybackslash}
+ \scanctxt
+ \catcode`\{=\other
+ \catcode`\}=\other
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other
+ \usembodybackslash
+}
\def\macroargctxt{%
- \catcode`\~=12
- \catcode`\^=12
- \catcode`\_=12
- \catcode`\|=12
- \catcode`\<=12
- \catcode`\>=12
- \catcode`\+=12
- \catcode`\@=12
- \catcode`\\=12}
+ \scanctxt
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+}
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
\fi}
-\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
-\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
- % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
+ % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
\begingroup
- \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
- \def\do##1{%
- \def\tempb{##1}%
- \ifx\tempa\tempb
- % remove this
- \else
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
- \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
- \fi}%
- \def\newmacrolist{}%
- % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
- \macrolist
- \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+ \let\do\unmacrodo
+ \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
\endgroup
\else
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
\fi
}
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ % remove this
+ \else
+ \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
+ \fi
+}
+
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
\expandafter\parsearg
\fi \next}
-% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
% expanded by \write.
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
\edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+% For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the
+% arguments (if present). Of course this is not nearly correct, but it
+% is the best we can do for now. makeinfo does not expand macros in the
+% argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex
+% isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \.
+%
+% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
+% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+%
+\def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup
+ \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}%
+ \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
% @alias.
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
-\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+ \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+ }%
+ \next
+}
\message{cross references,}
-% @xref etc.
\newwrite\auxfile
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
-% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
-\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
-\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
-\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
\let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\relax
-
-% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
-\def\donoderef{%
- \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
- {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\relax
- \fi
-}
-\def\unnumbnoderef{%
- \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\relax
- \fi
-}
-\def\appendixnoderef{%
- \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
- {Yappendixletterandtype}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+ \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\empty
\fi
}
-
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
%
\newcount\savesfregister
-\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
-
-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
-% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
-% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
-% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
-% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{{%
- \indexdummies
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
+% or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+% empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
- \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
- \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
- \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
-}}
+ \iflinks
+ {%
+ \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+ \turnoffactive
+ \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+ \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+ ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+ }%
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
+ \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+ \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+ \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
\unsepspaces
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
- \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
- \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
% Use the node name inside the square brackets.
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
\else
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
\else
\ifhavexrefs
% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
- \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+ \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
\else
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
\fi%
\fi
\fi
\fi
%
- % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
- % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
- % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
- % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
- % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
- % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+ % Make link in pdf output.
\ifpdf
\leavevmode
\getfilename{#4}%
- {\normalturnoffactive
+ {\turnoffactive
+ % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
+ %
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
+ goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
\else
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- goto name{#1}%
+ goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
\fi
}%
\linkcolor
\fi
%
- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
- \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+ % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
+ % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+ {%
+ % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+ % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+ \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+ }%
+ \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+ % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+ % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+ \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+ \refx{#1-snt}%
+ \else
+ \printedrefname
+ \fi
+ %
+ % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+ % "in MANUALNAME".
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ \fi
\else
- % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
- % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
- % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
- % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
- % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
- {\normalturnoffactive
- % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
- % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
- \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
- \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
- }%
- % [mynode],
- [\printednodename],\space
- % page 3
- \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+ % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+ %
+ % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+ % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+ % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
+ % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+ % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+ % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ \else
+ % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+ % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+ % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+ % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+ % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+ {\turnoffactive
+ % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+ % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+ \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+ \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+ }%
+ % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+ \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+ %
+ % But we always want a comma and a space:
+ ,\space
+ %
+ % output the `page 3'.
+ \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+ \fi
\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
-% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
-
-% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
-% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
-\def\dosetq#1#2{%
- {\let\folio=0%
- \normalturnoffactive
- \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
- \iflinks
- \next
- \fi
- }%
-}
-
-% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
-% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
-% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
-
-\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
-
-% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
-
-\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
-
-\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
-
-\def\Ynothing{}
-
-\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
-\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
-\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
-\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
-\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
-\else %
-\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
-\fi \fi \fi }
-
-\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
-\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
-\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
-\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
-\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
-\else %
-\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
-\fi \fi \fi }
-
-\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+% Things referred to by \setref.
%
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
- \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
-\else
- \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+ \ifnum\secno=0
+ \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+ \else
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+ \ifnum\secno=0
+ \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+ \else
+ \putwordSection@tie
+ @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
-
+%
\def\refx#1#2{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+ {%
+ \indexnofonts
+ \otherbackslash
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+ \csname XR#1\endcsname
+ }%
+ \ifx\thisrefX\relax
% If not defined, say something at least.
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
\iflinks
\fi
\else
% It's defined, so just use it.
- \csname X#1\endcsname
+ \thisrefX
\fi
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
}
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
%
-\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
- % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
- \catcode`\\ = 0
- \afterassignment\endgroup
- \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
+ %
+ % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+ \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
+ % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+ \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+ %
+ % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+ \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+ \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+ \else
+ % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+ % for later use in \listoffloats.
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
+ \fi
}
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
-\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+ \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \readdatafile{aux}%
+ \global\havexrefstrue
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\setupdatafile{%
\catcode`\^^@=\other
\catcode`\^^A=\other
\catcode`\^^B=\other
\catcode`\^^]=\other
\catcode`\^^^=\other
\catcode`\^^_=\other
- \catcode`\@=\other
- \catcode`\^=\other
- % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+ % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
%
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ %
+ % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
\catcode`\~=\other
\catcode`\[=\other
\catcode`\]=\other
\catcode`\$=\other
\catcode`\#=\other
\catcode`\&=\other
+ \catcode`\%=\other
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
- % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+ %
+ % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+ % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
+ % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+ % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+ % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+ % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
+ % now. --karl, 15jan04.
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ %
+ % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
{%
- \count 1=128
+ \count1=128
\def\loop{%
- \catcode\count 1=\other
- \advance\count 1 by 1
- \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+ \catcode\count1=\other
+ \advance\count1 by 1
+ \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
}%
}%
- % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
- % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
- % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
- % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
- % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
- % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+ %
+ % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
\catcode`\{=1
\catcode`\}=2
- \catcode`\%=\other
- \catcode`\'=0
- \catcode`\\=\other
- %
- \openin 1 \jobname.aux
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- \input \jobname.aux
- \global\havexrefstrue
- \global\warnedobstrue
- \fi
- % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
- \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
-\endgroup}
+ \catcode`\@=0
+}
+\def\readdatafile#1{%
+\begingroup
+ \setupdatafile
+ \input\jobname.#1
+\endgroup}
-% Footnotes.
+\message{insertions,}
+% including footnotes.
\newcount \footnoteno
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
-
{\catcode `\@=11
%
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
\gdef\footnote{%
+ \let\indent=\ptexindent
+ \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
%
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
\let\@sf\empty
- \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
%
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
\unskip
\thisfootno\@sf
- \footnotezzz
+ \dofootnote
}%
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
%
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
%
-\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
% So reset some parameters.
+ \hsize=\pagewidth
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
\footstrut
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
-\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
- \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
-\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
-\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
-\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
-
}%end \catcode `\@=11
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
-% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
+% would be lost.
+% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
+
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+% out prematurely.
%
-\def\|{%
- % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
- \leavevmode
- %
- % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
- \vadjust{%
- % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
- % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
- \vskip-\baselineskip
- %
- % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
- % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
- \llap{%
- %
- % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
- \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
- %
- % This is the space between the bar and the text.
- \hskip 12pt
- }%
- }%
+\def\startsavinginserts{%
+ \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+ \let\insert\saveinsert
+ \else
+ \let\checkinserts\relax
+ \fi
}
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+\def\saveinsert#1{%
+ \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+ \afterassignment\next
+ % swallow the left brace
+ \let\temp =
+}
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+
+\def\placesaveins#1{%
+ \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+ {\box#1}%
+}
+
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+{
+ \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
+ \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+}
+
+% initialization:
+\def\newsaveins #1{%
+ \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+ \next
+}
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+ \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+ \checksaveins #1}%
+}
+
+% initialize:
+\let\checkinserts\empty
+\newsaveins\footins
+\newsaveins\margin
+
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
% undone and the next image would fail.
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
\ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
- % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+ % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+ % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
\input epsf.tex
\fi
+\closein 1
%
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
\nobreak\bigskip
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
- % above and below.
+ % above and below.
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
\nobreak
\line\bgroup\hss
\endgroup}
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
+%
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+%
+% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
+% be referable.
+%
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+%
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+% chapter-level command.
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+%
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+ \let\thiscaption=\empty
+ \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+ %
+ % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+ %
+ % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+ % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+ %
+ \startsavinginserts
+ %
+ % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+ \par
+ %
+ \vtop\bgroup
+ \def\floattype{#1}%
+ \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+ \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+ %
+ \ifx\floattype\empty
+ \let\safefloattype=\empty
+ \else
+ {%
+ % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+ % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+ % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+ % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
+ %
+ \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+ \global\advance\floatno by 1
+ %
+ {%
+ % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
+ % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+ % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+ % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+ % lists of floats.
+ %
+ \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+ \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+ \vskip\parskip
+ %
+ % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% we have these possibilities:
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
+% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
+% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
+% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
+% @float & no caption:
+%
+\def\Efloat{%
+ \let\floatident = \empty
+ %
+ % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+ \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+ %
+ % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+ \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+ \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
+ \fi
+ % the number.
+ \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+ % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+ \let\captionline = \floatident
+ %
+ \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+ \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+ \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+ \fi
+ %
+ % caption text.
+ \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+ % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+ \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+ \vskip.5\parskip
+ \captionline
+ %
+ % Space below caption.
+ \vskip\parskip
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
+ % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+ % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+ % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
+ % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+ {%
+ \atdummies \turnoffactive
+ % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
+ % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
+ % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
+ \scanexp{%
+ \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
+ \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+ \thiscaption
+ \else
+ \thisshortcaption
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+ \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \egroup % end of \vtop
+ %
+ % place the captured inserts
+ %
+ % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+ % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+ %
+ \checkinserts
+}
+
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+%
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}
+
+% @caption, @shortcaption
+%
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+\def\getfloatno#1{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+ \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+ %
+ % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+ \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+ \fi
+ \let\floatno#1%
+}
+
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
+% first read the @float command.
+%
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
+% \thissection value which we \setref above.
+%
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+%
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
+% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
+%
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+}
+
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+%
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+ \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+ {%
+ % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+ % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+ \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \begingroup
+ \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
+ \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+ \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+%
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+% they won't appear in the aux file).
+%
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+ % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
+ % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+ % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+ % in pdf output.
+ \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+ %
+ % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+ \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+ \writeentry
+}}
+
\message{localization,}
% and i18n.
% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
%
-\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
-\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
- % Read the file if it exists.
- \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
- \ifeof1
- \errhelp = \nolanghelp
- \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
- \let\temp = \relax
- \else
- \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
- \fi
- \temp
+ % Read the file if it exists.
+ \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+ \ifeof 1
+ \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+ \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+ \else
+ \input txi-#1.tex
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
\endgroup
}
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
}
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
-% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. We also call
-% \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
-% The caller should also set \parskip.
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
+% physical page width.
%
-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
\voffset = #3\relax
\topskip = #6\relax
\splittopskip = \topskip
\normaloffset = #4\relax
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
%
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+ \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+ \fi
+ %
\setleading{\textleading}
%
\parindent = \defaultparindent
\setemergencystretch
}
-% Use `small' versions.
-%
-\def\smallenvironments{%
- \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
- \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
- \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
- \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
-}
-
% @letterpaper (the default).
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
\textleading = 13.2pt
%
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
- \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+ \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
+ {\voffset}{.25in}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+ {11in}{8.5in}%
}}
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
\textleading = 12pt
%
- \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+ \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+ {\voffset}{.25in}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+ {9.25in}{7in}%
%
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \deftypemargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = .5cm
- \smallenvironments
}}
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \textleading = 12pt
+ \textleading = 13.2pt
%
- \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+ % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+ % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+ % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
+ % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
+ % your texinfo source file like this:
+ % @tex
+ % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+ % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+ % @end tex
+ \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
%
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = 5mm
}}
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
\textleading = 12.5pt
%
- \internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+ \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+ {210mm}{148mm}%
%
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
\tolerance = 800
\hfuzz = 1.2pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0mm
- \deftypemargin = 0pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = 2mm
\tableindent = 12mm
- %
- \smallenvironments
}}
-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
-% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
- \textleading = 13.6pt
- %
\afourpaper
- \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+ \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+ {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
%
- % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
- % although this does not entirely make sense.
+ % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
\globaldefs = 0
}}
-% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
-\def\afourwide{%
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
\afourpaper
- \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
-}
+ \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+ {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}}
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
%
-\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
-\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
\setleading{\textleading}%
%
- \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ \dimen0 = #1
+ \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+ %
+ \dimen2 = \hsize
+ \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+ {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
}}
% Set default to letter.
\def\normalplus{+}
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
-% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
%
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
\catcode`\_=\active
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
\catcode`\|=\active
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
\catcode`\$=\active
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-%\catcode 27=\active
-%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
-
-% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
-{\catcode`\==\active
-\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
-
-\catcode`+=\active
-\catcode`\_=\active
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
\catcode`\@=0
-% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
-\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
-%{\catcode`\\=\other
-%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
-% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.
{\catcode`\\=\active
-@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+ @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+ @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+}
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
+% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
-\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
-% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
\catcode`\\=\active
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
% even after parsing them.
-@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
-@let\=@realbackslash
-@let~=@normaltilde
-@let^=@normalcaret
-@let_=@normalunderscore
-@let|=@normalverticalbar
-@let<=@normalless
-@let>=@normalgreater
-@let+=@normalplus
-@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-
-@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
-@let\=@normalbackslash
-@let~=@normaltilde
-@let^=@normalcaret
-@let_=@normalunderscore
-@let|=@normalverticalbar
-@let<=@normalless
-@let>=@normalgreater
-@let+=@normalplus
-@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+@def@turnoffactive{%
+ @let"=@normaldoublequote
+ @let\=@realbackslash
+ @let~=@normaltilde
+ @let^=@normalcaret
+ @let_=@normalunderscore
+ @let|=@normalverticalbar
+ @let<=@normalless
+ @let>=@normalgreater
+ @let+=@normalplus
+ @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+ @unsepspaces
+}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
+% effect.)
+%
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
%
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
@escapechar = `@@
-% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
@catcode`@& = @other
@catcode`@# = @other
@catcode`@% = @other
-@c Set initial fonts.
-@textfonts
-@rm
-
@c Local variables:
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
@c End:
+
+@c vim:sw=2:
+
+@ignore
+ arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
+@end ignore